دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraD7100

SB4F03(1X)

6MB1791X-03

ﺓﺭﻮﻓﺎﻐﻨﺳ ﻲﻓ ﺔﻋﺎﺒﻄﻟﺍ ﺖﻤﺗ

ﻲﻓ ﺰﺟﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﺱﺎﺒﺘﻗﻻﺍ ﺀﺎﻨﺜﺘﺳﺎﺑ)

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﺋﺰﺟ ﻭﺃ

ﹰ

ﺎﻴﻠﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻦﻣ ﺎﻬﻠﻜﺷ ﻥﺎﻛ ﺎﻤﻬﻣ ﺔﺨﺴﻧ ﻱﺍ ﻞﻤﻋ ﺯﻮﺠﻳ ﻻ

.ﻦﺸﻳﺭﻮﺑﺭﻮﻛ ﻥﻮﻜﻴﻧ ﻦﻣ ﻲﻄﺧ ﺢﻳﺮﺼﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ (ﺕﺎﻌﺟﺍﺮﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺓﺪﻗﺎﻨﻟﺍ ﺕﻻﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (384 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪BS-1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪DK-23‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ‪BF-1B‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪D7100‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EN-EL15‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ(‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) MH-25‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﹰﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪(.
PAGE 3
‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪xii 0 .........................................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺑﺔ‪ii 0 .............................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪352 0 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪332 0 ................................................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪vi 0 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪328 0 .................................
PAGE 4
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ "ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺑﺔ"‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ"؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪RAW (NEF‬؟‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺯﻳﺘﻴﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒ
PAGE 6
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7100‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (22 0‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )‪.(24 0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(26 0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫‪iv‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(30 0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(37 0‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(37 0‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.(39 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪8GB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .28‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 33‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(217 0‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(224 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪D7100‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪RGB‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌ
PAGE 9
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪) HDR‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪(HDR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ ISO NR‬
PAGE 10
‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫‪ b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪ b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ 1/3‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ b4‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ 6 ‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 8 ‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪ 10 ‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 13 ‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
PAGE 11
‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/125‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/100‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/80‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1/2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪TTL‬‬ ‫‪ e3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ *‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭ
PAGE 12
‫‪ g‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ g3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪g4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(261 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪U2‬‬ ‫‪+5 – –5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸ
PAGE 13
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪(273 0‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ –‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺜﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ‬ ‫–‬
PAGE 14
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻮﺑﺔ‪ii ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪iv ................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪vi .............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪35.....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )‪ i‬ﻭ ‪36........................................................................................(j‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪39.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 16
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪63....................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪66............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪66........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪119‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪119 ..............................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪120 ....................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪124 .................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪177‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪177 ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ %‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪178 ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ g‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪178 .....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 19
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪217‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪217 .......................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪217 ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪218 .................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 20
‫‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪238 ..........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d1‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ‪238 .........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪239 ...............................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :d3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪239 ..............
PAGE 21
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪261 .....................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪262 ................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪262 ........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪295‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪295 ........................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪303 ............................................................................................................(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪304 ....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪308 ...................................
PAGE 23
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .
PAGE 25
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ "ﻋﻴﻨﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺻﻜﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﹰ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪ (SLR‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ؛ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻨﺢ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺷﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻚ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪57 ،7 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪6 ...........................
PAGE 31
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪119...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪315 ،61 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪338................................................................
PAGE 32
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪233..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪59 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪121.............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪257 ،13 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪260 ،255 ،50.......
PAGE 33
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪33 ..................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪60 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪O/Q‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪197 ،40 ............................................................................
PAGE 34
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )‪(177 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫)‪.(57 0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻄﻲﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CH‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪94 .........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪51 ،49 ...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪86 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪124..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ‪92 ..........
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪1516 17‬‬ ‫‪18 19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪2322 21‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪6 7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2 3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪11 12‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪27 26‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ %‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪105........................................
PAGE 38
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪177 ،47 ،41 ،36 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪48 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪244......................................................
PAGE 39
‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪26 27 28 29 30‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫‪43‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫‪39‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ‪227.......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ"‪265 ،29 ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪147..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪241.............................................
PAGE 40
‫❚❚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .P‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪63 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪228.....................................................‬‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ‪113......................................
PAGE 41
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 42
‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )‪h‬؛ ‪.(41 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪h‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ )‪q‬؛‬ ‫‪.(177 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪q‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(68 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪.
PAGE 43
‫❚❚ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.(79 0) ISO‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪(S‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(82 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪(S‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬؛ ‪.(48 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛‬ ‫‪.(51 ،49 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ %‬؛ ‪.(86 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪E‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.(133 0‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 45
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )‪.(120 0‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ M‬ﺯﺭ )‪(Y‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪M‬؛ ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(12 0‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ /‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ :D‬ﻋﺮﺽ )‪(217 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :C‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(224 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :A‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪(229 0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫• ‪ :B‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪(261 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :N‬ﻳﻨﻘﺢ )‪(273 0‬‬ ‫• ‪ :O/m‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ )ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ؛ ‪(291 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :J‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.G‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) EN-EL15‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MH-25‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ‪ 35‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ )‪ .(q‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )‪ (w‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ °90‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )‪ .(e‬ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻜﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.OFF‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )‪ (q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ )‪ (w‬ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ )‪ ،(q‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ xxii–xxi‬ﻭ‪ 320–318‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪°0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪°40‬ﻡ؛ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪°0‬ﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪°15‬ﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪°45‬ﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪°60‬ﻡ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪.AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105 f/3.5–5.
PAGE 55
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ A-M‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M/A-M‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) A‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) M/A‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ A‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪EH-5b‬‬ ‫)‪ .(308 0‬ﻳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺷﻬﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) (SD) Secure Digital‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪ .(347 0‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪(2‬؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪ D‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )‪.(203 0‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻭ‪.(Q) Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻭ‪ (Q) Z‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) C‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .
PAGE 61
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﻟﺘﻼﺀﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺎﺩ‪ .
PAGE 62
X 34
PAGE 63
‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺳﺘﻀﻲﺀ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )‪ i‬ﻭ ‪(j‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ ،j‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺻﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.j‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .j‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) i‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪ A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪.(187 0) 3‬‬ ‫‪1/ 12‬‬ ‫‪NIKON D7100‬‬ ‫‪85mm‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪F5. 6‬‬ ‫‪1/ 125‬‬ ‫‪0, 0‬‬ ‫‪N OR‬‬ ‫‪ORMAL‬‬ ‫‪AL‬‬ ‫‪6000x4000‬‬ ‫‪100D7100 DSC_0001.
PAGE 68
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(Q) O‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ "ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ"‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.38-36‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪h‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ h‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .R‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪ p‬ﻃﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻤﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪ r‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺣﻔﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﻭﻻﻓﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‪/‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻟﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺃﺯﻫﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 73
‫‪ z‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻃﻌﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﻟﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻸ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻌﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 74
s 46
PAGE 75
‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ )‪ :(48 0‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ :(49 0‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪ :P‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ )"ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ"(‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪ :S‬ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ "ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ" ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ )‪ 1/1600‬ﺙ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )‪ 1/6‬ﺙ(‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫‪ :A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‪-‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (123 0‬ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 79
‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪ "v‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )ﻓﺘﺢ‪A/‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ .(52 0 ،%‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.
PAGE 80
‫❚❚ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ )‪ :(A‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (309 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )‪.
PAGE 81
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫)‪.(%‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Bulb‬ﻓﺘﺢ(‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ WR-T10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MC-DC2‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 82
# 54
PAGE 83
‫‪$‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U1‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،U1‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U2‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪CL‬‬ ‫‪CH‬‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪MUP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) d5‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (63 0‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺖ )‪.(67 0) NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.
PAGE 87
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪.E‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪ ،(71 0‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (I‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ‪DK-23‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ DK-23‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ DK-5‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ )‪ .(w‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪.MUP‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.
PAGE 90
k 62
PAGE 91
‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX a‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 23.5‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ × ‪ 15.6‬ﻣﻢ )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.(DX‬‬ ‫‪(18×12) 1.3× c‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 12.5 × 18.8‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ )‪ .(167 ،68 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪.(58 0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ×‪(18×12) 1.
PAGE 92
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪.(65 0‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (224 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻘﺺ ‪ DX ×1.3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ c‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺺ ‪.DX ×1.3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ‪DX ×1.
PAGE 93
‫❚❚ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ "ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ" ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ .(229 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Fn‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪(253 0 ،Fn‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،(255 0 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪) A AE-L/AF-L‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩﺍﻥ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(348 0‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫)‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪NEF‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﺤﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Raw‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ < NEF (RAW‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ #‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ $‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺃﻭ ‪ %‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:(63 0 ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪4000 × 6000‬‬ ‫‪3000 × 4496‬‬ ‫‪2000 × 2992‬‬ ‫‪3200 × 4800‬‬ ‫‪2400 × 3600‬‬ ‫‪1600 × 2400‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﻢ( *‬ ‫‪33.9 × 50.8‬‬ ‫‪25.4 × 38.1‬‬ ‫‪16.9 × 25.3‬‬ ‫‪27.1 × 40.6‬‬ ‫‪20.3 × 30.5‬‬ ‫‪13.5 × 20.
PAGE 97
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 98
d 70
PAGE 99
‫‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ )‪ .(78 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ (75 0‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ )‪.(76 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪AF-A‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪AF-C‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪75‬؛ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 51‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ●‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(72 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 105
‫‪ A‬ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻘﻔﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪) a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ (231 0 ،AF-C‬ﻭ‪) a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ،(231 0 ،AF-S‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪ (I‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ (non-AF NIKKOR‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )‪.(72 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫• ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ :AF‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ(‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺀ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪M ،A ،S ،P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ 6400–100‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪EV 1/3‬؛ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Hi 2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؛ ‪ 6400–100‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪EV 1/3‬؛ ‪ Hi 0.
PAGE 108
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺎﺭﺽ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ ISO-AUTO‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A ،S ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪Hi 0.3–Hi 2 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ Hi 0.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Hi 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV 2–0.3‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪) ISO 6400‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ < ISO‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪ .ISO-AUTO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ ISO-AUTO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 111
‫‪Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ‪) M‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫‪ A‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪-3.5‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫‪-8‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ ‪ %‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ .(83 0‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) EV –5‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻭ ‪) EV +5‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ( ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.EV 1/3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e4‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ (250 0 ،‬ﻟﺤﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 116
Z 88
PAGE 117
‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪،M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪*.
PAGE 118
‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪،(224 0‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ (91 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ .(95 0‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﺀ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 119
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .G‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 120
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )"‪("E‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ )‪ (A‬ﻋﻨﺒﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪91 0‬؛ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ K‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،L‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 121
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺩﺍﻓﺊ" ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) J‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ( ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺃﺑﺮﺩ" ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) K‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) N‬ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ ‪) I‬ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻱ( ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ d-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .d-6‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ .
PAGE 124
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪L‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ D‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ b a‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺖ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﹰ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 126
‫❚❚ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻐﻨﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.
PAGE 127
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪r‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( < ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪.
PAGE 128
‫❚❚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )‪ d-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (d-6‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪.
PAGE 129
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(T) X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )‪.(186 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪(d-6 – d-1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 130
‫❚❚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪102‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 131
‫❚❚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 132
r 104
PAGE 133
‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Controls‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 134
‫‪ A‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(110 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ )‪ (110 0‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪.Control‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫)‪ (105 0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 136
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ –2‬ﻭ ‪ +2‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﺨﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 137
‫‪ A‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 107‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺀ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪.Control‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Picture Control‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 139
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪.Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ؛ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.7‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Picture‬‬ ‫‪ Control Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‪ Capture NX 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ D7100‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .G‬ﻇﻠﻞ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪ Y‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ Z‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 143
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪(HDR‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )‪83 0‬؛ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ v‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ T‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ .
PAGE 144
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪.(HDR‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ )ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ) ‪ ،(HDR‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ v‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ c‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ T‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ U‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ v‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪ D‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﻻﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.
PAGE 146
J 118
PAGE 147
‫‪l‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ )‪ (GN‬ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻫﻮ ‪) 12‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ 20 ،ISO 100 ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻤﻠﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ k‬ﻭ‪ p‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﻭ‪ o‬ﻭ‪ s‬ﻭ‪ w‬ﻭ ‪g‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )‪.(120 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪g ،w ،s ،n ،p ،k ،i‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪M ،S‬‬ ‫‪A ،P‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪ +‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ *‬ ‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ S‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 149
‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 150
‫‪ A‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 151
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺗﻜﺎﻓﺆ ‪ (ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪1600‬‬ ‫‪800‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪2.8‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪5.
PAGE 152
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ EV –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EV +1‬ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،EV 1/3‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Y) M‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪FV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪:FV‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Fn‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ < Fn‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.
PAGE 154
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.FV‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .FV‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ (e) FV‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ FV‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 155
‫‪s‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ML-L3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ )‪ (309 0‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪.(ML-L3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (ML-L3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 156
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ML-L3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (5 ،3 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .ML-L3‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 157
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪c5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (238 0 ،(ML-L3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪ (ML-L3‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) g4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،(260 0 ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ML-L3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 158
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ (309 0) WR-1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،(309 0) WR-R10/WR-T10‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-1‬ﻭ ‪ WR-T10‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪WR-1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ WR-1‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.WR-1‬‬ ‫…ﻳﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻭ‪ E‬ﻣﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 160
‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﻭ‪ r‬ﻭ‪ w‬ﻭ‪ %‬ﻭ‪ g‬ﻭ‪ u‬ﻭ‪ 2 ،1‬ﻭ ‪ P ،3‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫‪n، 0‬‬ ‫‪z ،y ،x ،v ،u ،t ،s ،o ،p ،l ،k ،j ،i‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪4 Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪g w n p ،k ،i‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﻭ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ )‪ ،(ADL‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ "ﻳﺼﺤﺢ" ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 162
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ D‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ( ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ EV 1/3‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ )‪(EVs‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪+0.7/+0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪-0.3/-0.7/0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪+0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪-0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪+0.3/-0.3/0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪+0.7/+0.3/–0.3/–0.
PAGE 163
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪،(86 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.EV 5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 164
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .
PAGE 165
‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.89‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ WB‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ 5) 1‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ؛ ‪ ،(93 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 15) 3‬ﻣﻴﺮﺩ(‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ )‪.(91 0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 167
‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ADL‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.113‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪.ADL‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ADL‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ .
PAGE 168
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ؛ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 169
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A ،S ،P‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﻮﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪.
PAGE 170
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/2‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪ 1/3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺙ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 172
‫❚❚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 173
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MUP‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )‪.(265 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪ .
PAGE 174
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ؛‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(J‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 175
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،(127 0) ML-L3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪ ،(153 0‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(161 0‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 176
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ J‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ < ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (E‬ﺃﻭ ‪MUP‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.145‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ SB-910‬ﻭ‪ SB-900‬ﻭ‪ SB-800‬ﻭ‪ SB-700‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ .CPU‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪:CPU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪.CPU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪:CPU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‪ CPU-‬ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ "ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 180
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ GPS‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ GP-1‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (310 0‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪GPS‬؛ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪.GPS‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ DK-5‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(60 0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 182
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ؛ ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 183
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 184
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،i‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫)ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ g ،%‬ﻭ ‪:(u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 185
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(63 0) (18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(66 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 186
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪we‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪160‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪155‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 187
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪(269 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ،(78 0‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ × 19‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 188
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪CPU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ .(149 0‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪M‬‬ ‫)‪(47 0‬؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 189
‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (165 0) 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.
PAGE 190
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪) 153‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(155‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 191
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪(169‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ )‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ P‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ P‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﻭ×‪.(63 0) (18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ty‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺭﻣﺰ "ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ"‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪164‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .
PAGE 194
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪(269 0‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ .(169 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 195
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(63 0‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪ (161 0‬ﻫﻲ ‪ 9 :16‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪ (18×12) 1.3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ c‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪.(18×12) 1.3‬‬ ‫×‪(18×12) 1.
PAGE 196
‫‪HDMI A‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،(215 0) HDMI‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .R‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،HDMI-CEC‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟـ ‪ < HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 198
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ )ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ(‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )‪ .(185 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪.
PAGE 200
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 201
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺘﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻬﺬﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 202
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ )ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪ .
PAGE 203
‫‪ A‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ )‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪171‬؛ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪%‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .R‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪NEF (RAW) A‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ JPEG+NEF (RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ g ،%‬ﺃﻭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،u‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .(66 0) JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ )‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪.
PAGE 206
‫‪ %‬ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﻭﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.
PAGE 207
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪ .(182 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻠﻴﺔ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ؛ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮﺀ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫❚❚ ‪ g‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪180‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 209
‫❚❚ ‪ i‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 210
‫❚❚ ‪ u‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.a‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪a‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪182‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻛﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 211
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ؛ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .a‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.
PAGE 212
% 184
PAGE 213
‫‪I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .K‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(Q) O‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪K‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪J‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ 4 ،‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻜﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(187 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪(Q) O‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪(U) L‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 193‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ" ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ RGB‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟـ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ .(219 0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1/ 12‬‬ ‫‪1/ 12‬‬ ‫‪NIKON D7100‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪85mm‬‬ ‫‪F5.
PAGE 216
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ *‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪225.........................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ *‬ ‫‪100 -1‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻼﺕ( )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺮﻁ( ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 217
‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(T) X‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻭ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 218
‫❚❚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪M T R, S P D, A P .‬‬ ‫‪E X P . MO D E , I S O‬‬ ‫‪: , 1 / 4 0 0 0 , F 2. 8‬‬ ‫‪: , H i 0. 3,‬‬ ‫‪: + 1. 3, + 5 / 6‬‬ ‫‪F O C A L L E N G T H : 8 5 mm‬‬ ‫‪: 85‬‬ ‫‪L EN S‬‬ ‫‪/ 1. 4‬‬ ‫‪: S / V R- O n‬‬ ‫‪A F / VR‬‬ ‫‪: B u i l t - i n , C MD‬‬ ‫‪F L ASH T YP E‬‬ ‫‪: S L OW‬‬ ‫‪S Y N C MO D E‬‬ ‫‪, : M : T T L , + 3. 0 A : T T L , + 3.
PAGE 219
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ (236 0 ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﹸﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪) VR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ Picture Control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 220
‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪NIKON D7100‬‬ ‫‪85mm‬‬ ‫‪1/ 4000 F2. 8‬‬ ‫‪Hi 0. 3‬‬ ‫‪+ 1. 0‬‬ ‫‪SLOW‬‬ ‫‪–1. 3‬‬ ‫‪0, 0‬‬ ‫‪85mm‬‬ ‫‪1/ 12‬‬ ‫‪1/ 4000 F2. 8‬‬ ‫‪Hi 0. 3‬‬ ‫‪+ 1. 0‬‬ ‫‪SLOW‬‬ ‫‪–1. 3‬‬ ‫‪0, 0‬‬ ‫‪N OR‬‬ ‫‪ORMAL‬‬ ‫‪AL‬‬ ‫‪6000x4000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪196..........................................................................
PAGE 221
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ "ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ" ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪( S) W‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (S) W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 72‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(T) X‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪/(T) X‬‬ ‫‪(S) W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (35‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﻼﻉ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 224
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻭﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (U) L‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪.(262 ،32 0‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻠﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(Q) O‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 226
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )‪.(199 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫)‪ .(217 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 227
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(S) W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (T) X‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 228
I 200
PAGE 229
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫‪ViewNX 2TM‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،ViewNX 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .202‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪ ،D7100‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 230
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ‪) Apple QuickTime‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ Intel Core :JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪Xeon‬‬ ‫• ﺻﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪،Pentium 4 ،Intel Celeron :JPEG‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪) H.264‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core Duo‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ 1.
PAGE 231
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )‪.(201 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ UC-E6‬ﻭﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 232
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Start Transfer‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ .USB‬ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻯﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺭﻯﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 233
‫‪ A‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ UT-1‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (310 0‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ‪ Wireless Transmitter Utility‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ‪ Wireless Transmitter Utility‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ;UT-1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ UT-1‬ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ‪ Wireless Transmitter Utility‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(xxvi‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ,D7100‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ UT-1‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 1.
PAGE 235
‫‪ D‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،UT-1‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ P‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ftp‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ ، P‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ )‪ ،(290 0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ FTP‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 236
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ (346 0) PictBridge‬ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.UC-E6‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ؛ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 237
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪195 0‬؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﹰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(S) W‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،D‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.186‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(208‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪210‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ :(DPOF‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(213 0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 239
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ,2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ، D‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪,1‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .186‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .(T) X‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ .1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 240
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪212‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) 209‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪.DPOF‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) 2‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ؟(‪.
PAGE 242
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ )ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(5‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 243
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫)‪) (HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪.
PAGE 244
‫❚❚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ (261 0‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) HDMI-CEC‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪-‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 245
‫‪U‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.
PAGE 246
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪L‬؛ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 247
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ .(187 0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ L‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ؛ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 248
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪220‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 249
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫)‪ ،(225 0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(؟ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.
PAGE 250
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.K‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪T‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .
PAGE 251
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ .(217 0‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(218 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 252
‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.
PAGE 253
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ W‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪ : W‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ : X‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 254
‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 255
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ sRGB‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ "ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ "،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .
PAGE 256
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪NR‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺙ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﺎﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ؛ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "l m‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ(‪ .
PAGE 257
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 258
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪c5‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍ
PAGE 259
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ )‪.(325 0‬‬ ‫‪ :a‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪ ،(71 0‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.
PAGE 260
‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ AF-C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ AF-A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪.
PAGE 261
‫‪ :a6‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 51 B‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 51‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 11 A‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 11‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 262
‫‪ :b‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.
PAGE 263
‫‪ :b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪ .(86 0‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.±0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .
PAGE 264
‫‪ :b4‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ )‪ (‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 13‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ .(149 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.
PAGE 265
‫‪ :c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )‪.
PAGE 266
‫‪ :c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﺮﺽ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ؛‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ؛ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 267
‫‪ :d2‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪ (9 0‬ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.(63 0) DX‬‬ ‫‪ :d3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ISO/ISO‬ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 268
‫‪ :d6‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.100‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،d6‬ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ )‪.(t00‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 348‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 269
‫‪ :d8‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ ،(v‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪ (10 0‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ )‪w‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺘﺎﻡ )‪x‬؛ ﺧﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 270
‫‪ :d12‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪MB-D15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MB-D15‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AA‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪) LR6 1‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫‪) HR6 2‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪(Ni-MH AA‬‬ ‫‪) FR6 3‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ‪(AA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ AA‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 271
‫‪ :d13‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ MB-D15‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪ EH-5b‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،MB-D15‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.
PAGE 272
‫‪ :e‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )‪ .(305 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 273
‫❚❚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ،(244 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )‪ (305 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ FP‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‪.
PAGE 274
‫‪ :e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪TTL 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ .(246 0‬ﻻ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻋﻖ )‪.(246 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )‪.
PAGE 275
‫‪ A‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪SB-400‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،SB-400‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪ e3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-400‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ TTL‬ﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪" A‬ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ"‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ < ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 276
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪248‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ – –‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.B‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.B‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 277
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻈﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ °60‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ °30‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ °30‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ °60‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 278
‫‪ A‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ – – ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ < ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (Y) M‬ﻭﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﻀﺎﻑ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ B‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ ±0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ < ‪ .TTL‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 279
‫‪ :e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،(305 0) CLS‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ .(50 0‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ .
PAGE 280
‫‪ :f‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪ :f1‬ﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻭﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪J‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‪.
PAGE 281
‫‪ :f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Fn‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.
PAGE 282
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺷﻲﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ (24×16) DX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(63 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ )‪.(239 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،Fn‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" )‪.(291 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ".‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 283
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(63 0‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ )ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،EV 1‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 284
‫‪ :f4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،A AE-L/AF-L‬ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻪ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ +‬ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.
PAGE 285
‫‪ :f5‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪.
PAGE 286
‫‪ :f6‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪ .
PAGE 287
‫‪ :f9‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪4 MB-D15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻨﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.
PAGE 288
‫‪ :g2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪.(259 0) Fn‬‬ ‫‪ :g3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،(259 0) Fn‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 289
‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.
PAGE 290
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ (Q) O‬ﻭ‪ (Q) Z‬ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ )‪.
PAGE 291
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ‪.(Capture NX 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ CPU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 292
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺀ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 293
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫)‪.(28 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ Y‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 294
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 295
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ )‪ (190 0‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ViewNX 2‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Capture NX 2‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ‪.(309 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .111‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 36‬ﺣﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 296
‫ﺣﻔﻆ‪/‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪69 0) 1‬؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.
PAGE 297
‫ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻖ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.°5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 298
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 12‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ؛ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ • ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺷﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻭﻗﻒ( • ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.
PAGE 299
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺜﺒﺖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ WU-1a‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (310 0‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Wireless Mobile Utility‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 300
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﹰ ﺎ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪،Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 301
‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ RAW/NEF‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،66‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.
PAGE 302
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) J‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬؛ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،186‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 303
‫‪ A‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.P‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 304
‫‪D-Lighting‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ D-Lighting‬ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ" ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .
PAGE 305
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ؛ ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (T) X‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (T) X‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪،1 : 1 ،4 : 5 ،3 : 4 ،2 : 3‬‬ ‫ﻭ‪9.
PAGE 306
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺯﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ "ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 307
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎﺀ‬ ‫)‪ (189 0‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .(T) X‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 308
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ؛ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪68 ،66 0‬؛ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 309
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 0.1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ .2.0‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪1.0‬؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0.5‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ‪ 2.0‬ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪ .
PAGE 310
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪.NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ )‪ NEF (RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬؛ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،186‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 311
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ EXE‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.(G‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﻴﺔ ‪9 : 16‬‬ ‫)‪(163 0‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.
PAGE 312
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (S) W‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫)ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪(T) X‬؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،186‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ .(1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .8‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 313
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 0.25‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ؛‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .
PAGE 314
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺗﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻗﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 315
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺩﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ (S) W‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (S) W‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 316
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫‪ N‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪288‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(T) X‬؛ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،186‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 317
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪7‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﻢ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 5-3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ‪ .
PAGE 318
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ )ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ (o‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.(P‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 319
‫‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪ m /‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻬﺎ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻨﺼﺮ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪.(294 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 320
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .V‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4-1‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪292‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﻮﺍﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 321
‫❚❚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .J‬ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 3-2‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.
PAGE 322
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ <‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )‪ ،(O‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻇﻠﻞ ‪ m‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .J‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 323
‫‪n‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 324
‫‪ 11‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ AI 200–80 f/2.8 ED‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ AI 400–200 f/4 ED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ ،(149 0) CPU‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 13‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ .(149 0) CPU‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻮﺓ‪.
PAGE 325
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪AF-S/AF-I‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪ AF-S/AF-I‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ AF-S‬ﻭ ‪ AF-I‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 200–70 f/2.8G ED VR II‬‬ ‫‪AF-S VR 200–70 f/2.8G ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S 200–80 f/2.8D ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 200–70 f/4G ED VR‬‬ ‫‪*AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105‬‬ ‫‪f/2.8G IF-ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 200 f/2G ED VR II‬‬ ‫‪AF-S VR 200 f/2G ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 400–200 f/4G ED VR II‬‬ ‫‪AF-S VR 400–200 f/4G ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 300 f/2.
PAGE 326
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،CPU‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 327
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺔ ‪ 300–16‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺠﺐ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 0.6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 328
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪ (18×12) 1.3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪f/3.5–4.5G ED‬‬ ‫‪f/4G IF-ED‬‬ ‫‪f/2.8G IF-ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 24–10‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 24–12‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 55–17‬‬ ‫‪f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫‪f/2.8G ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 300–18‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 24–14‬‬ ‫‪f/4G ED VR‬‬ ‫‪AF-S NIKKOR 35–16‬‬ ‫‪f/2.8D IF-ED‬‬ ‫‪AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 35–17‬‬ ‫‪f/2.
PAGE 329
‫‪ D‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 400–200 f/4G IF-ED‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S NIKKOR 24–14 f/2.8G ED‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S NIKKOR 400–200 f/4G ED VR II‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S NIKKOR 200 f/2G ED VR II‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S NIKKOR 300 f/2.8G ED VR II‬‬ ‫• ‪AF-S VR Nikkor 200 f/2G IF-ED‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.
PAGE 330
‫‪ A‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ﻫﻲ ‪ 24 × 36‬ﻣﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7100‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ (24×16) DX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﻲ ‪ 15.6 × 23.5‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) D7100‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ×‪ ،(18×12) 1.3‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ×1.3‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‪.
PAGE 331
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(Speedlights‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 332
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪ (CLS) Creative Lighting System‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 333
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪:CLS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪CLS‬‬ ‫‪SU-800‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪SB-910‬‬ ‫‪SB-400 SB-R200‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺮﺏ‬ ‫‪ SB-600 SB-700 SB-800 SB-900‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ‪ i-TTL‬ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪i-TTL‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪SLR‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ AA‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪TTL‬‬ ‫‪ GN‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ RPT‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪i-TTL i-TTL‬‬ ‫]‪
PAGE 334
‫❚❚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ TTL‬ﻭﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.
PAGE 335
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlight‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،CLS‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ .CLS‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-80DX‬ﻭ ‪ SB-28DX‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ SB-50DX‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7100‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺌﺔ "ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ j‬ﻭ‪ %‬ﻭ‪ ،u‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 336
‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ D7100‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ •‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :(24 ،22 0) EN-EL15‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪EN-EL15‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﺋﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻭﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‪ :(22 0) MH-25a/MH-25‬ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 337
‫• ‪ :Capture NX 2‬ﺑﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪ :Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ؛ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ xxvi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 338
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(206 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫• ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :(206 0) UT-1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ UT-1‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺇﺛﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ ftp‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Camera Control Pro 2‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ UT-1‬ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ EP-5B‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪.
PAGE 339
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (q‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.EP-5B‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺎﻧ ﹰﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 340
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 341
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺸﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫❚❚ "ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ"‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 342
‫❚❚ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻭﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 343
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )‪ ،(313 0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺼﺢ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺪ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 344
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.8‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 345
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 346
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺎﻓﹰﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻴﺒﻪ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻤﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺃ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪.
PAGE 347
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻄﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﺰﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻔﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻔﻔﺔ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ‪.
PAGE 348
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ EN-EL15‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺷﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ‪ .
PAGE 349
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 350
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪322‬‬ ‫‪ :a1‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫‪ :a2‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫‪ :a3‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ :a4‬ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :a5‬ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :a6‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :a7‬ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪ :b2‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b3‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :b4‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ :b5‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :c1‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪ :c2‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ :c3‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ :c4‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻧﻄﻔﺎﺀ
PAGE 351
‫‪،1‬‬ ‫‪،m ،l ،p ،k‬‬ ‫‪،2‬‬ ‫‪،y ،x‬‬ ‫‪،t ،r ،o ،n ،A ،S‬‬ ‫‪3 u i g % 0 ،z w v ،u s M P j i‬‬ ‫‪z z z z z z z z‬‬ ‫‪z z z z z‬‬ ‫— — — — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— — ‪z z‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪ :e1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e2‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :e3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫— — — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— — ‪z z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ :e4‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫— — — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— — ‪z z‬‬ ‫‪ :e5‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫— — — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— — ‪z z‬‬ ‫‪ :e6‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫— — — —‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫—‬ ‫— —
PAGE 352
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺰﺭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 353
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ *‬ ‫‪a1‬‬ ‫‪a2‬‬ ‫‪a3‬‬ ‫‪a4‬‬ ‫‪a5‬‬ ‫‪a6‬‬ ‫‪a7‬‬ ‫‪b1‬‬ ‫‪b2‬‬ ‫‪b3‬‬ ‫‪b4‬‬ ‫‪b5‬‬ ‫‪c1‬‬ ‫‪c2‬‬ ‫‪c3‬‬ ‫‪c4‬‬ ‫‪c5‬‬ ‫‪d1‬‬ ‫‪d2‬‬ ‫‪d3‬‬ ‫‪d4‬‬ ‫‪d5‬‬ ‫‪d6‬‬ ‫‪d7‬‬ ‫‪d8‬‬ ‫‪d9‬‬ ‫‪d10‬‬ ‫‪d11‬‬ ‫‪d12‬‬ ‫‪d13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF-S‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮ
PAGE 354
‫❚❚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪U2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪326‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪P‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪262‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻭﻭﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪264‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪313‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪265‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GPS‬ﻟ
PAGE 355
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(P‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪:P‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO 100‬؛ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ‪ f/1.4‬ﻭﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪) f/16‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪(AF-S NIKKOR 50 f/1.4G ،‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪f/1‬‬ ‫‪1 6 15‬‬ ‫‪f/1.4‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪f/16 − f/1.4‬‬ ‫‪16 1‬‬ ‫‪/3‬‬ ‫‪f/2‬‬ ‫‪f/2.8‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪f/4‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪f/5.
PAGE 356
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 357
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(71 0) AF‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )‪.(78 ،76 0‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻱ ‪) f2‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،(253 0 ،Fn‬ﺃﻭ ‪) f3‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) f4 ،(255 0‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،(256 0 ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) f9‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،4 MB-D15‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 358
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ )‪.(264 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.
PAGE 359
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ "ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ" )ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﻋﺮﺿﻲ" )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ(‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﻴﺎ )‪.(222 0‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )‪.(265 0‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(265 0‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.(222 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )‪.(196 0‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ )‪.(31 0‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪.
PAGE 360
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪H‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.(f-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.
PAGE 361
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﹰ؛ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (%‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.S‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‪.
PAGE 362
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،W‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫‪،W‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪347‬‬ ‫• ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .
PAGE 363
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 364
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪D7100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪336‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ‪) F‬ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ DX‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ; ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ
PAGE 365
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ :(24×16) DX‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ 100%‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ‪ 100%‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ×‪ :(18×12) 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ‪ 97%‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ‪ 97%‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ × 0.94‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻢ ‪ f/1.4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ –1.0 ،‬ﻡ‪(–1‬‬ ‫‪ 19.5‬ﻣﻢ )‪ –1.
PAGE 366
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪) II‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻭ ‪(D‬؛ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) II‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ CPU‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(؛ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 75%‬ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 367
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ )ﻣﻌﺰﺯ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪/‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ :g ،w ،s ،o ،n ،p ،k ،i‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :0 ،M ،A ،S ،P‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 12 ،12‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻡ‪° 20 ،ISO 100 ،‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ :TTL‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ i-TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ 2016 RGB‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ SB-910‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-900‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-800‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SB-700‬ﺃﻭ
PAGE 368
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ • ‪1080 × 1920‬؛ ‪) 30p‬ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻲ(‪24p ،25p ،‬‬ ‫• ‪720 × 1280‬؛ ‪50p ،60p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ‪ 60p‬ﻭ ‪ 50p‬ﻭ ‪ 30p‬ﻭ ‪ 25p‬ﻭ ‪ 24p‬ﻫﻮ ‪ 59.94‬ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﻭ ‪ 29.97‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﻭ ‪ 23.976‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ؛ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ ★ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ ‪H.
PAGE 369
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 76 × 106.5 × 135.5‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 765‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ؛ ‪ 675‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ )ﺟﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ(‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪° 3± 23 :(CIPA‬ﻡ‪.
PAGE 370
‫❚❚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR lens‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 18-105‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ G‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ CPU‬ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ F‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪DX‬‬ ‫‪ 105–18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪f/3.5–5.
PAGE 371
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪f/3.5-5.6G ED VR‬‬ ‫‪AF-S DX NIKKOR 105-18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ AF-S DX NIKKOR 105–18 f/3.5–5.6G ED VR‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ SLR‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .DX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪﺍ )ﺗﻘﺰﺡ( )‪ (ED‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﺷﻮﺍﺋﺐ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪.
PAGE 372
‫‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 0.6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ )ﻇﻼﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪D3000 ،D3100 ،D5000‬‬ ‫‪D3200 ،D5100 ،D5200‬‬ ‫‪ D300 ،D7000 ،D7100 ،D700‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪D80 ،D100 ،D200‬‬ ‫‪ D70 ،D90‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪D50‬‬ ‫‪ D40 ،D60‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2.5‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1.0‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 3.0‬ﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1.
PAGE 373
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺸﻖ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪LC-67‬‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫• ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻧﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪CL-1018‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HB-32‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻟﺒﻴﺔ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫• ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪ LF-1‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪LF-4‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻸ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 374
‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ DCF‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.0‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (DCF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :DPOF‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Exif‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ :2.3‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) Exif‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،2.
PAGE 375
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 376
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC‬‬ ‫‪ UHS-I‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(66 0‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ،(68 0‬ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )‪.(63 0‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(24×16) DX‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ 12 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 22.7‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪191‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫)‪ ،NEF (RAW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ 14 ،‬ﺑﺖ‬ ‫—‬ ‫‪ 28.
PAGE 377
‫‪—d6 A‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(240 0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 378
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ،AA‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ؛ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.
PAGE 379
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪NEF (RAW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ‪ ،WU-1a‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪UT-1‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪VR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪:EN-EL15‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ
PAGE 380
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪352‬‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪36 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪) j‬ﻭﺿﻊ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻼﺵ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪36 .....................‬‬ ‫‪) h‬ﻣﺸﻬﺪ(‪41 .............................................‬‬ ‫‪) k‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪41 .......................................‬‬ ‫‪) l‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪41 ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪) p‬ﻃﻔﻞ(‪42 .........................................................‬‬ ‫‪) m‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ(‪42 ...........................................
PAGE 381
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪292 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪277 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪105 ................(Picture Control‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GPS‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪152 ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪324 ،231 ،224 ،131............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪192 ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪277 ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪241 ،3...........................
PAGE 382
‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪4..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‪167 ،68 ........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪169 .....................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ )‪209 ......................(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪68 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪302 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‪197 ،40 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪198 ..........................
PAGE 383
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪6.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪13 ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪57 ،7 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪76 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪84 ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪84 ...................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪315 ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪258 .............................
PAGE 384
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.